Ford - Edge Awd - Workshop Manual - 2011 - 2011

Factory Workshop Manual Make Ford Model Edge Awd Engine and year V6-3.7L (2011) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Blind Spot Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blind Spot Module: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Blind Spot Module: Customer Interest Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Blind Spot Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blind Spot Module: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Blind Spot Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Central Control Module: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns Central Control Module: Customer Interest Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns TSB 11-3-15 03/15/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS WITH MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH FORD: 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2011 MKX This article supersedes TSB 11-3-4 to update the Issue statement. ISSUE Some 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch may experience various concerns in the following areas: Clock intermittently displays incorrect time, voice recognition, voice recognition when using SYNC services, phone pairing, USB device detection, Travel Link download time. ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Failure to follow the Accessory Protocol Inter[ace Module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues and system functionality concerns. 1. Ensure that the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) release is at 71.04 or higher, then close the IDS software. 2. Edge and MKX vehicles - skip to Step 3. Explorer vehicles - Media Hub removal is not recommended for this procedure due to limited USB cable length. A second USB cable connection can be easily accessed behind the passenger side center console panel for this procedure. a. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-12. Gently pull the front of the passenger console panel away from the console, allowing access to the USB cable connection. b. Disconnect the vehicle USB cable and connect the SYNC re-flash kit cable and Adapter Rotunda RTTP CCMSYNC-Kit or equivalent Male-A USB-to-female mini USB cable to the vehicle male USB cable. 3. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00 APIM Programming - Standard selection. Update the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) to the latest BH suffix level. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110315A 2011 Edge, MKX And 1.3 Hrs. Explorer: Reprogram The APIM (Full Reprogramming Procedure) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 OASIS CODES: 200000 ^ 201000 ^ 201100 ^ 203000 ^ 204000 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Central Control Module: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns > Page 25 ^ 204100 ^ 205000 ^ 207000 ^ 207500 ^ 208000 ^ 208100 ^ 208200 ^ 208300 ^ 208999 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns Central Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns TSB 11-3-15 03/15/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS WITH MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH FORD: 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2011 MKX This article supersedes TSB 11-3-4 to update the Issue statement. ISSUE Some 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch may experience various concerns in the following areas: Clock intermittently displays incorrect time, voice recognition, voice recognition when using SYNC services, phone pairing, USB device detection, Travel Link download time. ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Failure to follow the Accessory Protocol Inter[ace Module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues and system functionality concerns. 1. Ensure that the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) release is at 71.04 or higher, then close the IDS software. 2. Edge and MKX vehicles - skip to Step 3. Explorer vehicles - Media Hub removal is not recommended for this procedure due to limited USB cable length. A second USB cable connection can be easily accessed behind the passenger side center console panel for this procedure. a. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-12. Gently pull the front of the passenger console panel away from the console, allowing access to the USB cable connection. b. Disconnect the vehicle USB cable and connect the SYNC re-flash kit cable and Adapter Rotunda RTTP CCMSYNC-Kit or equivalent Male-A USB-to-female mini USB cable to the vehicle male USB cable. 3. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00 APIM Programming - Standard selection. Update the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) to the latest BH suffix level. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110315A 2011 Edge, MKX And 1.3 Hrs. Explorer: Reprogram The APIM (Full Reprogramming Procedure) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 OASIS CODES: 200000 ^ 201000 ^ 201100 ^ 203000 ^ 204000 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns > Page 31 ^ 204100 ^ 205000 ^ 207000 ^ 207500 ^ 208000 ^ 208100 ^ 208200 ^ 208300 ^ 208999 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Collision Avoidance Module: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Collision Avoidance Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Collision Avoidance Module: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Collision Avoidance Module: Customer Interest Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 53 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 54 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 55 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 56 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Communications Control Module: Customer Interest Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 62 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 68 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 69 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 70 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 71 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 76 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 82 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 88 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 89 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 90 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 91 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: Customer Interest Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 114 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 115 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 116 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 117 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > NHTSA10V516000 > Oct > 10 > Recall 10V516000: Liftgate Latch Non-Compliance Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V516000: Liftgate Latch Non-Compliance VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 25, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V516000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Hatchback/Liftgate: Lock POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 71 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles manufactured from July 1, 2010, through October 8, 2010. These vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic module settings that disable the locking function of the liftgate. Accordingly, the vehicles fail to conform to the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." CONSEQUENCE: The liftgate lock may be disabled and the driver may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. REMEDY: Ford will notify owners and dealers will have the affected control modules updated free of charge. The safety recall began on November 1, 2010. Owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10C14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 127 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 128 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 129 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 130 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > NHTSA10V516000 > Oct > 10 > Recall 10V516000: Liftgate Latch Non-Compliance Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V516000: Liftgate Latch Non-Compliance VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 25, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V516000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Hatchback/Liftgate: Lock POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 71 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles manufactured from July 1, 2010, through October 8, 2010. These vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic module settings that disable the locking function of the liftgate. Accordingly, the vehicles fail to conform to the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." CONSEQUENCE: The liftgate lock may be disabled and the driver may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. REMEDY: Ford will notify owners and dealers will have the affected control modules updated free of charge. The safety recall began on November 1, 2010. Owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10C14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Module HVAC: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Control Module HVAC: Customer Interest A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Module HVAC: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response Control Module HVAC: Customer Interest Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response TSB 10-23-2 12/03/10 OUTSIDE AIR TEMP READING INACCURATE AND/OR SLOW TO UPDATE IN WARM AMBIENT TEMPERATURES FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 9/1/2010, may experience the outside air temperature (OAT) reading inaccurate and/or slow to update in actual ambient temperatures 70 °F (21 °C) or above. Vehicles equipped with dual automatic temperature control (DATC) System may also experience a lack of A/C cooling at startup. This typically occurs when the OAT sensor is (10-15 °F or more) lower than the actual ambient temperature during starting up. This causes reduced air[low because the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) blower speed is not adequate for the climate conditions. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 69.05 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASH THE OAT DISPLAY WILL NEED A FEW MINUTES, INITIALLY, OF CONSTANT DRIVING TO OBTAIN THE CURRENT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102302A 2011 Edge, MKX: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The HVAC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19980 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response TSB 10-23-2 12/03/10 OUTSIDE AIR TEMP READING INACCURATE AND/OR SLOW TO UPDATE IN WARM AMBIENT TEMPERATURES FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 9/1/2010, may experience the outside air temperature (OAT) reading inaccurate and/or slow to update in actual ambient temperatures 70 °F (21 °C) or above. Vehicles equipped with dual automatic temperature control (DATC) System may also experience a lack of A/C cooling at startup. This typically occurs when the OAT sensor is (10-15 °F or more) lower than the actual ambient temperature during starting up. This causes reduced air[low because the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) blower speed is not adequate for the climate conditions. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 69.05 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASH THE OAT DISPLAY WILL NEED A FEW MINUTES, INITIALLY, OF CONSTANT DRIVING TO OBTAIN THE CURRENT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102302A 2011 Edge, MKX: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The HVAC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19980 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > NHTSA11V128000 > Feb > 11 > Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection Body Control Module: Recalls Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 21, 2011 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 11V128000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Electrical System: Software POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 8,022 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Ford F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge, and Lincoln MKX trucks manufactured from October 25, 2010, through November 20, 2010. These vehicles were inspected using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) that had a custom software routine to read the suspect Body Control Module (BCM) serial number. Based on the serial number the BCM was either not affected or replaced. The custom software routine was not reading the correct set of characters, and was not able to identify a BCM that required replacement affected BCMs may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which could result in a vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the body control module and if necessary replace it free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about March 7, 2011. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship CENTER AT 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10S14S3 Date: 110218 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 185 Attachment I - Administrative Information [NEW!] OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS will be activated on February 18, 2011. [NEW!] FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes FSA VIN list will be available through the website on February 18, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. [NEW!] STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. [NEW!] SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Previously inspected vehicles have been reactivated in OASIS for Safety Recall 10S14. Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 186 ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES If a customer's vehicle requires replacement of the BCM and it is necessary to order parts Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel insurance and tax which will be at the owner's expense. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee the shortest delivery time. Prior approval for more than two rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. [NEW!] CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Rental Expenses: Must be claimed on the same repair line as labor operation 10S14D. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. - Misc. Expense Code: RENTAL - Misc. Expense Amount: Actual dollar amount (up to 2 days) Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 187 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION To manage part availability dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line. Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for a BCM please be prepared to provide dealer P&A; code VIN RO # and vehicle mileage. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 188 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 189 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 190 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 191 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > NHTSA10V659000 > Dec > 10 > Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard Body Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 29, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V659000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Structure: Body POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 14,737 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles. During a six-day production period, the supplier of the body control module manufactured modules that may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which can result in an unattended vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the body control module if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before January 10, 2011. owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 200 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 201 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 202 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 203 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > NHTSA11V128000 > Feb > 11 > Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 21, 2011 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 11V128000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Electrical System: Software POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 8,022 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Ford F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge, and Lincoln MKX trucks manufactured from October 25, 2010, through November 20, 2010. These vehicles were inspected using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) that had a custom software routine to read the suspect Body Control Module (BCM) serial number. Based on the serial number the BCM was either not affected or replaced. The custom software routine was not reading the correct set of characters, and was not able to identify a BCM that required replacement affected BCMs may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which could result in a vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the body control module and if necessary replace it free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about March 7, 2011. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship CENTER AT 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10S14S3 Date: 110218 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 213 Attachment I - Administrative Information [NEW!] OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS will be activated on February 18, 2011. [NEW!] FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes FSA VIN list will be available through the website on February 18, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. [NEW!] STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. [NEW!] SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Previously inspected vehicles have been reactivated in OASIS for Safety Recall 10S14. Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 214 ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES If a customer's vehicle requires replacement of the BCM and it is necessary to order parts Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel insurance and tax which will be at the owner's expense. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee the shortest delivery time. Prior approval for more than two rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. [NEW!] CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Rental Expenses: Must be claimed on the same repair line as labor operation 10S14D. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. - Misc. Expense Code: RENTAL - Misc. Expense Amount: Actual dollar amount (up to 2 days) Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 215 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION To manage part availability dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line. Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for a BCM please be prepared to provide dealer P&A; code VIN RO # and vehicle mileage. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 216 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 217 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 218 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 219 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > NHTSA10V659000 > Dec > 10 > Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 29, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V659000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Structure: Body POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 14,737 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles. During a six-day production period, the supplier of the body control module manufactured modules that may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which can result in an unattended vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the body control module if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before January 10, 2011. owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 228 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 229 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 230 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 231 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 243 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 249 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 260 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 266 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right > Page 276 IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right > Page 282 IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 283 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-24-8 Date: 101216 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 284 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-24-8 Date: 101216 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 285 b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 286 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications Alignment Specifications Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 289 Alignment: Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 290 Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > System Information > Service Precautions Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks: Service Precautions TUNE-UP SERVICE PRECAUTIONS - Tag or mark vacuum hoses before disconnecting them. After completing a job, double check that the vacuum hoses are properly connected. - To disconnect vacuum hoses, pull on the end, not the middle of the hose. - To pull apart electrical connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires. - Before disconnecting pressurized fuel lines, always perform Fuel Pressure Release procedure in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. - When replacing fuel filters, always check all affected lines and fittings for leaks. - Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. To prevent serious burns: Avoid contact with hot metal parts. - Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 294 - Before servicing the vehicle: Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers. - Take caution that keys, buckles, or buttons do not scratch paint. - Do not operate the engine indoors without proper ventilation. - Do not smoke while working on the vehicle. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > System Information > Service Precautions Filters: Service Precautions SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. - Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable. - Do not put oily rags in pockets. - Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. - Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. - First Aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. - Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin. - Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed. - Do not use gasoline, kerosine, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinner or solvents for cleaning skin. - If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay. - Where practicable, degrease components prior to handling. - Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided. WARNING: Brake fluid may be irritating to the skin or eyes. In case of contact, take the following actions: - Eye Contact - rinse eyes thoroughly with water. - Skin Contact - wash skin with soap and water. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > System Information > Service Precautions Hoses: Service Precautions SERVICE PRECAUTIONS To prevent vehicle damage, always observe the following precautions: After servicing a hose, check for leaks before and after test driving the vehicle. - Always use the correct size hose. Do not use standard sized hose in place of metric hose or vice versa. Always use the correct type of hose. Never use vacuum hose in place of fuel hose. Never use heater hose in place of PCV hose. - When replacing hoses which are attached to the engine on one end and the frame or body on the other end, always leave sufficient length to compensate for engine movement from torque. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford Part Number - PM-1-C (US) Ford Specification - WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System ................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 11.7 quarts (11.1 liters)* With Trailer Tow Package ................................................................................................................... ................................................. 11.9 qts (11.3 Liters) NOTE: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. * Indicates only approximate dry fill capacity. Some applications may vary. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 309 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - Motorcraft Speciality Green Engine Coolant (dark green-colored)* Ford Part Number - VC-10-A2 (US) - CVC-10-A (Canada) Ford Specification - WSS-M97B55-A * Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid ....................................................................................................................................................... 11.1 quarts (10.5 liters)* * Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications mat vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick's normal operating range. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 314 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Name - Motorcraft MERCON LV ATF Ford Part Number - XT-10-QLV Ford Specification - MERCON LV NOTE: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV should only use MERCON LV fluid. Use of any fluid other then the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Rear Differential (AWD) ....................................................................................................................... .............................................. 2.4 pints (1.15 Liters) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 319 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Ford Part Number - XY-80W90-QL Ford Specification - WSP-M2C197-A Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Power Transfer Unit ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 12 oz. (0.35 liters) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 324 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) Fluid (AWD) Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant. Ford Part Number - XY-75W140-QL Ford Specification - WSL-M2C192-A Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil............................................................................................................................................. .........................................................5.5 quarts (5.2L) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 329 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil (US) - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil (US) - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil (Canada) - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil (Canada)* Ford Part Number - XO-5W20-QSP (US) - XO-5W20-QFS (US) - CXO-5W20-LSP12 (Canada) - CXO-5W20-LFS12 (Canada) Ford Specification - WSS-M2C930-A and API Certification Mark *Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Fluid: > 10-21-1 > Nov > 10 > Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist Power Steering Fluid: Customer Interest Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist TSB 10-21-1 11/08/10 REDUCTION OF POWER STEERING ASSIST DURING PARKING LOT MANEUVERS OR AFTER ENGINE START FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience a reduction in power steering assist after engine start or during low speed parking maneuvers. Assist levels may return to normal after raising engine RPM and the system returns to normal function. The technician may not be able to reproduce the problem. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the Power Steering Pump. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-02. 2. Flush the Power Steering System. Refer to WSM, Section 211-00. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102101A 2011 Edge, MKX FWD: 1.8 Hrs. Replace The Power Steering Pump Includes Time To Flush The Power Steering System (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102101B 2011 Edge, MKX AWD: 1.9 Hrs. Replace The Power Steering Pump Includes Time To Flush The Power Steering System (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A696 49 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Fluid: > 10-21-1 > Nov > 10 > Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist > Page 338 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Fluid: > 10-21-1 > Nov > 10 > Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist Power Steering Fluid: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist TSB 10-21-1 11/08/10 REDUCTION OF POWER STEERING ASSIST DURING PARKING LOT MANEUVERS OR AFTER ENGINE START FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience a reduction in power steering assist after engine start or during low speed parking maneuvers. Assist levels may return to normal after raising engine RPM and the system returns to normal function. The technician may not be able to reproduce the problem. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the Power Steering Pump. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-02. 2. Flush the Power Steering System. Refer to WSM, Section 211-00. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102101A 2011 Edge, MKX FWD: 1.8 Hrs. Replace The Power Steering Pump Includes Time To Flush The Power Steering System (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102101B 2011 Edge, MKX AWD: 1.9 Hrs. Replace The Power Steering Pump Includes Time To Flush The Power Steering System (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A696 49 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Fluid: > 10-21-1 > Nov > 10 > Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist > Page 344 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 345 Power Steering Fluid: Specifications POWER STEERING FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft MERCON V ATF Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM Ford Specification - MERCON V Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 350 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 351 Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 352 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > System Information > Service Precautions Service Reminder Indicators: Service Precautions SERVICE PRECAUTION All Service Reminder Indicators should be investigated or serviced immediately. Vehicle damage may result if the indicator is ignored. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Monitoring System: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation > Page 361 Tire Monitoring System: Service and Repair TPMS Sensor Training - Intellegent Access (IA) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Intelligent Access (IA) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires~ tire rotation will not affect the system. NOTE: Refer to Description and Operation, Intelligent Access (IA) with Push Button Start in Anti-Theft to review the procedures for achieving the various ignition states (ignition in accessory, ignition on, ignition start, ignition off) on vehicles with this feature. 1. With the ignition OFF, press and release the brake pedal. 2. Using the start/stop switch, position the ignition from OFF to RUN 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Position the ignition to OFF position. 5. Using the start/stop switch, position the ignition from OFF to RUN 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation > Page 362 display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMSsensor identifiers trained to the and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C278O, cause the to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the On-Demand Self Test. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation > Page 363 Tire Monitoring System: Service and Repair TPMS Sensor Training - Integrated Keyhead Transmittier (IKT) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires~ tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation > Page 364 - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C278O, cause SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil............................................................................................................................................. .........................................................5.5 quarts (5.2L) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 372 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil (US) - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil (US) - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil (Canada) - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil (Canada)* Ford Part Number - XO-5W20-QSP (US) - XO-5W20-QFS (US) - CXO-5W20-LSP12 (Canada) - CXO-5W20-LFS12 (Canada) Ford Specification - WSS-M2C930-A and API Certification Mark *Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Tools and Equipment Oil Cooler: Tools and Equipment 1/2" Oil Cooler Line Rem. AST tool# 8023 Used to disconnect 1/2" transmission oil cooler lines. - Used for R and R of Transmission Oil Cooler Lines - Orange-Anodized Aluminum Construction - Quick line removal - Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set - Fits 2009 Escape with 6F Trans - Fits Ford Edge Contact AST for pricing. Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943 This Tool is also available in the following kits: Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Page 376 8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > System Information > Service Precautions Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks: Service Precautions TUNE-UP SERVICE PRECAUTIONS - Tag or mark vacuum hoses before disconnecting them. After completing a job, double check that the vacuum hoses are properly connected. - To disconnect vacuum hoses, pull on the end, not the middle of the hose. - To pull apart electrical connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires. - Before disconnecting pressurized fuel lines, always perform Fuel Pressure Release procedure in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. - When replacing fuel filters, always check all affected lines and fittings for leaks. - Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. To prevent serious burns: Avoid contact with hot metal parts. - Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 380 - Before servicing the vehicle: Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers. - Take caution that keys, buckles, or buttons do not scratch paint. - Do not operate the engine indoors without proper ventilation. - Do not smoke while working on the vehicle. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System ................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 11.7 quarts (11.1 liters)* With Trailer Tow Package ................................................................................................................... ................................................. 11.9 qts (11.3 Liters) NOTE: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. * Indicates only approximate dry fill capacity. Some applications may vary. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 386 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - Motorcraft Speciality Green Engine Coolant (dark green-colored)* Ford Part Number - VC-10-A2 (US) - CVC-10-A (Canada) Ford Specification - WSS-M97B55-A * Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > NHTSA11V128000 > Feb > 11 > Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection Body Control Module: Recalls Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 21, 2011 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 11V128000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Electrical System: Software POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 8,022 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Ford F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge, and Lincoln MKX trucks manufactured from October 25, 2010, through November 20, 2010. These vehicles were inspected using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) that had a custom software routine to read the suspect Body Control Module (BCM) serial number. Based on the serial number the BCM was either not affected or replaced. The custom software routine was not reading the correct set of characters, and was not able to identify a BCM that required replacement affected BCMs may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which could result in a vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the body control module and if necessary replace it free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about March 7, 2011. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship CENTER AT 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10S14S3 Date: 110218 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 402 Attachment I - Administrative Information [NEW!] OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS will be activated on February 18, 2011. [NEW!] FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes FSA VIN list will be available through the website on February 18, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. [NEW!] STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. [NEW!] SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Previously inspected vehicles have been reactivated in OASIS for Safety Recall 10S14. Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 403 ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES If a customer's vehicle requires replacement of the BCM and it is necessary to order parts Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel insurance and tax which will be at the owner's expense. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee the shortest delivery time. Prior approval for more than two rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. [NEW!] CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Rental Expenses: Must be claimed on the same repair line as labor operation 10S14D. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. - Misc. Expense Code: RENTAL - Misc. Expense Amount: Actual dollar amount (up to 2 days) Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 404 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION To manage part availability dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line. Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for a BCM please be prepared to provide dealer P&A; code VIN RO # and vehicle mileage. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 405 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 406 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 407 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 408 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > NHTSA10V659000 > Dec > 10 > Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard Body Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 29, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V659000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Structure: Body POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 14,737 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles. During a six-day production period, the supplier of the body control module manufactured modules that may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which can result in an unattended vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the body control module if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before January 10, 2011. owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 417 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 418 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 419 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 420 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > NHTSA11V128000 > Feb > 11 > Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 21, 2011 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 11V128000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Electrical System: Software POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 8,022 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Ford F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge, and Lincoln MKX trucks manufactured from October 25, 2010, through November 20, 2010. These vehicles were inspected using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) that had a custom software routine to read the suspect Body Control Module (BCM) serial number. Based on the serial number the BCM was either not affected or replaced. The custom software routine was not reading the correct set of characters, and was not able to identify a BCM that required replacement affected BCMs may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which could result in a vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the body control module and if necessary replace it free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about March 7, 2011. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship CENTER AT 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10S14S3 Date: 110218 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 430 Attachment I - Administrative Information [NEW!] OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS will be activated on February 18, 2011. [NEW!] FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes FSA VIN list will be available through the website on February 18, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. [NEW!] STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. [NEW!] SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Previously inspected vehicles have been reactivated in OASIS for Safety Recall 10S14. Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 431 ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES If a customer's vehicle requires replacement of the BCM and it is necessary to order parts Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel insurance and tax which will be at the owner's expense. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee the shortest delivery time. Prior approval for more than two rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. [NEW!] CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Rental Expenses: Must be claimed on the same repair line as labor operation 10S14D. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. - Misc. Expense Code: RENTAL - Misc. Expense Amount: Actual dollar amount (up to 2 days) Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 432 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION To manage part availability dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line. Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for a BCM please be prepared to provide dealer P&A; code VIN RO # and vehicle mileage. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 433 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 434 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 435 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 436 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > NHTSA10V659000 > Dec > 10 > Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 29, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V659000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Structure: Body POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 14,737 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles. During a six-day production period, the supplier of the body control module manufactured modules that may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which can result in an unattended vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the body control module if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before January 10, 2011. owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 445 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 446 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 447 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 448 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 459 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 465 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > System Information > Service Precautions Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks: Service Precautions TUNE-UP SERVICE PRECAUTIONS - Tag or mark vacuum hoses before disconnecting them. After completing a job, double check that the vacuum hoses are properly connected. - To disconnect vacuum hoses, pull on the end, not the middle of the hose. - To pull apart electrical connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires. - Before disconnecting pressurized fuel lines, always perform Fuel Pressure Release procedure in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. - When replacing fuel filters, always check all affected lines and fittings for leaks. - Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. To prevent serious burns: Avoid contact with hot metal parts. - Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 469 - Before servicing the vehicle: Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers. - Take caution that keys, buckles, or buttons do not scratch paint. - Do not operate the engine indoors without proper ventilation. - Do not smoke while working on the vehicle. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > NHTSA11V128000 > Feb > 11 > Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection Body Control Module: Recalls Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 21, 2011 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 11V128000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Electrical System: Software POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 8,022 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Ford F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge, and Lincoln MKX trucks manufactured from October 25, 2010, through November 20, 2010. These vehicles were inspected using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) that had a custom software routine to read the suspect Body Control Module (BCM) serial number. Based on the serial number the BCM was either not affected or replaced. The custom software routine was not reading the correct set of characters, and was not able to identify a BCM that required replacement affected BCMs may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which could result in a vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the body control module and if necessary replace it free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about March 7, 2011. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship CENTER AT 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10S14S3 Date: 110218 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 483 Attachment I - Administrative Information [NEW!] OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS will be activated on February 18, 2011. [NEW!] FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes FSA VIN list will be available through the website on February 18, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. [NEW!] STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. [NEW!] SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Previously inspected vehicles have been reactivated in OASIS for Safety Recall 10S14. Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 484 ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES If a customer's vehicle requires replacement of the BCM and it is necessary to order parts Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel insurance and tax which will be at the owner's expense. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee the shortest delivery time. Prior approval for more than two rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. [NEW!] CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Rental Expenses: Must be claimed on the same repair line as labor operation 10S14D. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. - Misc. Expense Code: RENTAL - Misc. Expense Amount: Actual dollar amount (up to 2 days) Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 485 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION To manage part availability dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line. Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for a BCM please be prepared to provide dealer P&A; code VIN RO # and vehicle mileage. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 486 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 487 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 488 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 489 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > NHTSA10V659000 > Dec > 10 > Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard Body Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 29, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V659000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Structure: Body POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 14,737 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles. During a six-day production period, the supplier of the body control module manufactured modules that may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which can result in an unattended vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the body control module if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before January 10, 2011. owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 498 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 499 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 500 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 501 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > NHTSA11V128000 > Feb > 11 > Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 21, 2011 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 11V128000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Electrical System: Software POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 8,022 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Ford F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge, and Lincoln MKX trucks manufactured from October 25, 2010, through November 20, 2010. These vehicles were inspected using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) that had a custom software routine to read the suspect Body Control Module (BCM) serial number. Based on the serial number the BCM was either not affected or replaced. The custom software routine was not reading the correct set of characters, and was not able to identify a BCM that required replacement affected BCMs may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which could result in a vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the body control module and if necessary replace it free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about March 7, 2011. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship CENTER AT 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10S14S3 Date: 110218 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 511 Attachment I - Administrative Information [NEW!] OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS will be activated on February 18, 2011. [NEW!] FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes FSA VIN list will be available through the website on February 18, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. [NEW!] STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. [NEW!] SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Previously inspected vehicles have been reactivated in OASIS for Safety Recall 10S14. Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 512 ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES If a customer's vehicle requires replacement of the BCM and it is necessary to order parts Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel insurance and tax which will be at the owner's expense. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee the shortest delivery time. Prior approval for more than two rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. [NEW!] CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Rental Expenses: Must be claimed on the same repair line as labor operation 10S14D. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. - Misc. Expense Code: RENTAL - Misc. Expense Amount: Actual dollar amount (up to 2 days) Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 513 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION To manage part availability dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line. Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for a BCM please be prepared to provide dealer P&A; code VIN RO # and vehicle mileage. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 514 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 515 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 516 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 517 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > NHTSA10V659000 > Dec > 10 > Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 29, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V659000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Structure: Body POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 14,737 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles. During a six-day production period, the supplier of the body control module manufactured modules that may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which can result in an unattended vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the body control module if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before January 10, 2011. owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 526 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 527 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 528 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 529 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > NHTSA11V128000 > Feb > 11 > Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection Body Control Module: Recalls Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 21, 2011 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 11V128000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Electrical System: Software POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 8,022 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Ford F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge, and Lincoln MKX trucks manufactured from October 25, 2010, through November 20, 2010. These vehicles were inspected using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) that had a custom software routine to read the suspect Body Control Module (BCM) serial number. Based on the serial number the BCM was either not affected or replaced. The custom software routine was not reading the correct set of characters, and was not able to identify a BCM that required replacement affected BCMs may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which could result in a vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the body control module and if necessary replace it free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about March 7, 2011. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship CENTER AT 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10S14S3 Date: 110218 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 543 Attachment I - Administrative Information [NEW!] OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS will be activated on February 18, 2011. [NEW!] FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes FSA VIN list will be available through the website on February 18, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. [NEW!] STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. [NEW!] SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Previously inspected vehicles have been reactivated in OASIS for Safety Recall 10S14. Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 544 ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES If a customer's vehicle requires replacement of the BCM and it is necessary to order parts Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel insurance and tax which will be at the owner's expense. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee the shortest delivery time. Prior approval for more than two rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. [NEW!] CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Rental Expenses: Must be claimed on the same repair line as labor operation 10S14D. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. - Misc. Expense Code: RENTAL - Misc. Expense Amount: Actual dollar amount (up to 2 days) Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 545 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION To manage part availability dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line. Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for a BCM please be prepared to provide dealer P&A; code VIN RO # and vehicle mileage. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 546 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 547 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 548 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 549 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > NHTSA10V659000 > Dec > 10 > Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard Body Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 29, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V659000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Structure: Body POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 14,737 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles. During a six-day production period, the supplier of the body control module manufactured modules that may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which can result in an unattended vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the body control module if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before January 10, 2011. owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 558 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 559 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 560 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 561 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > NHTSA11V128000 > Feb > 11 > Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 21, 2011 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 11V128000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Electrical System: Software POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 8,022 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Ford F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge, and Lincoln MKX trucks manufactured from October 25, 2010, through November 20, 2010. These vehicles were inspected using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) that had a custom software routine to read the suspect Body Control Module (BCM) serial number. Based on the serial number the BCM was either not affected or replaced. The custom software routine was not reading the correct set of characters, and was not able to identify a BCM that required replacement affected BCMs may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which could result in a vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the body control module and if necessary replace it free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about March 7, 2011. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship CENTER AT 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10S14S3 Date: 110218 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 571 Attachment I - Administrative Information [NEW!] OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS will be activated on February 18, 2011. [NEW!] FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes FSA VIN list will be available through the website on February 18, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. [NEW!] STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. [NEW!] SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Previously inspected vehicles have been reactivated in OASIS for Safety Recall 10S14. Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 572 ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES If a customer's vehicle requires replacement of the BCM and it is necessary to order parts Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel insurance and tax which will be at the owner's expense. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee the shortest delivery time. Prior approval for more than two rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. [NEW!] CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Rental Expenses: Must be claimed on the same repair line as labor operation 10S14D. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. - Misc. Expense Code: RENTAL - Misc. Expense Amount: Actual dollar amount (up to 2 days) Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 573 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION To manage part availability dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line. Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for a BCM please be prepared to provide dealer P&A; code VIN RO # and vehicle mileage. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 574 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 575 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 576 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 577 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > NHTSA10V659000 > Dec > 10 > Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 29, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V659000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Structure: Body POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 14,737 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles. During a six-day production period, the supplier of the body control module manufactured modules that may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which can result in an unattended vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the body control module if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before January 10, 2011. owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 586 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 587 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 588 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 589 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 599 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 605 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 614 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 620 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Component Information > Service Precautions Fuel Pump: Service Precautions WARNING: ADHERE TO THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES ANY TIME THE FUEL SYSTEM IS BEING WORKED ON IN ORDER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE AND PERSONAL INJURY - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 degrees C (1000 degrees F).) - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Component Information > Service Precautions Fuel Tank: Service Precautions WARNING: ADHERE TO THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES ANY TIME THE FUEL SYSTEM IS BEING WORKED ON IN ORDER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE AND PERSONAL INJURY - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 degrees C (1000 degrees F).) - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 639 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 645 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid ....................................................................................................................................................... 11.1 quarts (10.5 liters)* * Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications mat vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick's normal operating range. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 652 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Name - Motorcraft MERCON LV ATF Ford Part Number - XT-10-QLV Ford Specification - MERCON LV NOTE: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV should only use MERCON LV fluid. Use of any fluid other then the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 662 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 668 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 677 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 683 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Rear Differential (AWD) ....................................................................................................................... .............................................. 2.4 pints (1.15 Liters) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 689 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Ford Part Number - XY-80W90-QL Ford Specification - WSP-M2C197-A Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 700 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 706 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Power Transfer Unit ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 12 oz. (0.35 liters) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 712 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) Fluid (AWD) Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant. Ford Part Number - XY-75W140-QL Ford Specification - WSL-M2C192-A Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Customer Interest A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 724 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues TSB 10-21-2 11/08/10 6F50/6F55 TRANSMISSION - SLIP/NEUTRAL OUT, 5TH GEAR START FROM STOP, ELECTRONIC PRNDL ERROR, BACKUP CAMERA IN D-BUILT 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 FORD: 2009-2011 Taurus, Edge, Flex LINCOLN: 2009-2011 MKS, MKT, MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-17-4 to update the vehicle model years and the production build date ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Edge, MKX, Taurus, Flex, MKS and 2010-2011 MKT vehicles built 3/13/2009-6/30/2010 and equipped with a 6F50 or 6F55 transmissions may intermittently exhibit slipping/neutral out, 5th gear start from stop, electronic PRNDL error, backup camera on in Drive or speed control dropping out intermittently, this may be due to high resistance in the transmission range (TR) sensor. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to diagnose and correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check the TR sensor circuit resistance. 1. With brakes applied, engine Off, key On and move the shifter into the low gear (L or M) position. 2. Turn key Off. 3. Disconnect Connector C168 from the transmission. 4. Measure the resistance between the transmission connector pins: ^ 8 and 4 ^ 8 and 5 ^ 8 and 6 ^ 8 and 7 a. The top row of the transmission's pins are numbered 1-10 from left to right. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: > 10-21-2 > Nov > 10 > A/T Controls - Slipping/5th gear Start/Other Issues > Page 730 b. If any of the four measurements are above 5 Ohms, proceed to Step 5 c. If all measurements are within specification, this procedure does not apply, continue with normal diagnostics. 5. Replace the TR sensor. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01. The last three steps of the WSM, Section 307-01 procedure are very important in order to prevent damage or unnecessary work. a. The WSM states to remove the retaining pin that holds the TR sensor in the transmission case. A small 6" (15 cm) rolling head pry bar is effective in removing the pin. b. The WSM goes into detail on making sure that the park pawl actuator rod does not become disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment by keeping the end of the park pawl actuator rod behind the machined valve body mating surface of the transaxle case, while removing the park pawl actuator rod from the TR sensor and reinstalling it back into the TR sensor. If the park pawl actuator rod becomes disengaged from the park pawl and the abutment, transaxle removal and disassembly is required to reinstall the actuator rod. (Figure 2) Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102102A 2009-2011 Edge, Flex, 2.5 Hrs. MKX, MKS, Taurus and 2010-2011 MKT: Replace The TR Sensor Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7H557 42 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford Part Number - PM-1-C (US) Ford Specification - WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 741 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 742 Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 743 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 775 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 776 Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 777 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right > Page 814 IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right > Page 820 IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 821 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-24-8 Date: 101216 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 822 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-24-8 Date: 101216 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 823 b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 824 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications Alignment Specifications Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 827 Alignment: Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 828 Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Fluid: > 10-21-1 > Nov > 10 > Steering Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist Power Steering Fluid: Customer Interest Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist TSB 10-21-1 11/08/10 REDUCTION OF POWER STEERING ASSIST DURING PARKING LOT MANEUVERS OR AFTER ENGINE START FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience a reduction in power steering assist after engine start or during low speed parking maneuvers. Assist levels may return to normal after raising engine RPM and the system returns to normal function. The technician may not be able to reproduce the problem. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the Power Steering Pump. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-02. 2. Flush the Power Steering System. Refer to WSM, Section 211-00. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102101A 2011 Edge, MKX FWD: 1.8 Hrs. Replace The Power Steering Pump Includes Time To Flush The Power Steering System (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102101B 2011 Edge, MKX AWD: 1.9 Hrs. Replace The Power Steering Pump Includes Time To Flush The Power Steering System (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A696 49 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Fluid: > 10-21-1 > Nov > 10 > Steering Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist > Page 839 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Fluid: > 10-21-1 > Nov > 10 > Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist Power Steering Fluid: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist TSB 10-21-1 11/08/10 REDUCTION OF POWER STEERING ASSIST DURING PARKING LOT MANEUVERS OR AFTER ENGINE START FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience a reduction in power steering assist after engine start or during low speed parking maneuvers. Assist levels may return to normal after raising engine RPM and the system returns to normal function. The technician may not be able to reproduce the problem. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the Power Steering Pump. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-02. 2. Flush the Power Steering System. Refer to WSM, Section 211-00. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102101A 2011 Edge, MKX FWD: 1.8 Hrs. Replace The Power Steering Pump Includes Time To Flush The Power Steering System (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102101B 2011 Edge, MKX AWD: 1.9 Hrs. Replace The Power Steering Pump Includes Time To Flush The Power Steering System (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A696 49 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Fluid: > 10-21-1 > Nov > 10 > Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist > Page 845 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 846 Power Steering Fluid: Specifications POWER STEERING FLUID Ford Part Name - Motorcraft MERCON V ATF Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM Ford Specification - MERCON V Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Pump: > 10-21-1 > Nov > 10 > Steering Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist Power Steering Pump: Customer Interest Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist TSB 10-21-1 11/08/10 REDUCTION OF POWER STEERING ASSIST DURING PARKING LOT MANEUVERS OR AFTER ENGINE START FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience a reduction in power steering assist after engine start or during low speed parking maneuvers. Assist levels may return to normal after raising engine RPM and the system returns to normal function. The technician may not be able to reproduce the problem. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the Power Steering Pump. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-02. 2. Flush the Power Steering System. Refer to WSM, Section 211-00. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102101A 2011 Edge, MKX FWD: 1.8 Hrs. Replace The Power Steering Pump Includes Time To Flush The Power Steering System (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102101B 2011 Edge, MKX AWD: 1.9 Hrs. Replace The Power Steering Pump Includes Time To Flush The Power Steering System (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A696 49 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Pump: > 10-21-1 > Nov > 10 > Steering Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist > Page 855 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > 10-21-1 > Nov > 10 > Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist Power Steering Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist TSB 10-21-1 11/08/10 REDUCTION OF POWER STEERING ASSIST DURING PARKING LOT MANEUVERS OR AFTER ENGINE START FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience a reduction in power steering assist after engine start or during low speed parking maneuvers. Assist levels may return to normal after raising engine RPM and the system returns to normal function. The technician may not be able to reproduce the problem. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the concern. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Replace the Power Steering Pump. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-02. 2. Flush the Power Steering System. Refer to WSM, Section 211-00. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102101A 2011 Edge, MKX FWD: 1.8 Hrs. Replace The Power Steering Pump Includes Time To Flush The Power Steering System (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102101B 2011 Edge, MKX AWD: 1.9 Hrs. Replace The Power Steering Pump Includes Time To Flush The Power Steering System (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A696 49 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > 10-21-1 > Nov > 10 > Steering - Reduced Low Speed Steering Assist > Page 861 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Column: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Steering Column: Customer Interest Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Column: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Steering Column: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right Front Subframe: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right > Page 885 IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right > Page 891 IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 892 Front Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-24-8 Date: 101216 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 893 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-24-8 Date: 101216 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 894 b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 895 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 896 Front Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe - Front Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 897 Subframe - Front NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. With a wax pencil, mark the relationship of the front subframe to the underbody at the mounting locations. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 898 2. Remove the RH splash shield. 3. Remove the 3 pushpin fasteners, the 7 screws and the front splash shield. 4. Remove the 3 RH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Remove the 3 LH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts and separate the lower bumper from the subframe. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 899 6. Remove the 3 power steering tube bracket bolts from the RH side of the subframe and position the power steering tube aside. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. NOTE: - Use the holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. - RH side shown, LH side similar. Remove the 2 stabilizer bar link-to-control arm nuts (1 each side) and separate the stabilizer bar links from the lower control arms. Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 8. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Remove the lower control arm-to-knuckle pinch bolts and separate the lower control arms from the knuckles. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 900 9. Loosen the Y-pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 10. Remove the 4 nuts and the Y-pipe assembly. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 11. NOTE: - The steering gear is not removed with the front subframe and must be positioned aside. - Position the steering gear aside using mechanic's wire. Remove the 4 bolts and position the steering rack aside using a suitable length of mechanic's wire. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten the steering gear bolts in the sequence shown. To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 12. Remove the 4 bolts and position the stabilizer bar aside using a suitable length of mechanic's wire. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 901 - Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 13. Remove the nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 14. Remove the 3 bolts from the roll restrictor bracket. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 15. Position the lift table under the subframe. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 902 16. NOTE: - Align the front subframe index marks to the body index marks made during removal. - During installation, the subframe brackets are loosely installed with the support bracket bolts. Tighten the rear subframe nuts prior to tightening the support bracket bolts. - LH shown, RH similar. Remove the underbody cross brace. Remove the RH and LH cross brace bolts and the cross brace. - Discard the bolts. - To Install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 17. Remove the 2 nuts, 2 bolts and the subframe support brackets. - Discard the nuts and bolts. - To install, tighten the nuts to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft). - To install, tighten the bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 18. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 903 19. Remove the 2 middle subframe nuts and remove the subframe. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft). 20. Transfer the components as necessary. 21. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe - Rear Subframe - Rear Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 908 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Rear Subframe Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 909 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Rear Subframe NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the rear wheels. 2. If equipped, remove the bolts from the driveshaft-to-rear drive unit flange. - To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 910 3. With a wax pencil, mark the relationship of the rear subframe to the underbody at the mounting locations. 4. Remove the muffler and tailpipe assembly. 5. Disconnect the LH and RH wheel speed sensor connectors. 6. NOTE: All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) similar. Remove the connector from the front of the subframe and position aside. 7. NOTICE: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose may occur. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) from the rear hub spindle-to-brake caliper. To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 911 8. Remove the 2 bolts (1 each side) from the brake hose bracket. 9. Position the brake calipers aside using mechanic's wire. It is not necessary to disconnect the hydraulic brake lines. 10. Remove the 2 nuts (1 each side) from the parking brake cable bracket and upper stabilizer shaft. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 11. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) from the parking brake cable-to-backing plate. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 912 12. Remove the rear shock-to-trailing link lower nuts and flag bolts. - Discard the nuts and flag bolts. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 13. NOTICE: - The rear subframe must be secured to the lifting table. The rear subframe may become unstable and fall from the lifting table. - Position a jackstand under the front of the vehicle to keep the vehicle from becoming unstable on the hoist. Position the lifting table under the rear subframe. 14. Remove the 4 front (2 each side) bushing brace-to-body bolts. - Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 15. Remove the 2 front (1 each side) mounting bolts from the rear subframe. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 913 - Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 200 Nm (148 lb-ft). 16. NOTE: The bolts are 2 different sizes, note the location of the bolts to make sure of correct installation. Remove the 10 bolts (5 each side) from the trailing links-to-vehicle body. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 17. NOTE: The rear springs are under pressure. The lifting table must be lowered slowly to relieve the spring pressure. Remove the 2 rear mounting bolts. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 200 Nm (148 lb-ft). 18. Remove the rear subframe. 19. Transfer the components as necessary. 20. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 914 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe Bushings - Rear Differential, Rear Subframe Bushings - Differential, Rear Special Tool(s) Subframe Bushings - Rear Differential, Rear Removal Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 915 NOTE: There are 2 Rear Drive Unit (RDU) bushings in the rear subframe, this procedure shows how to remove one bushing. The procedure for the remaining RDU bushing is identical. 1. Remove the RDU. 2. NOTE: - Make sure the Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Bushing Remover/Installer 204-617/2 is positioned with the larger opening toward the bushing to act as the receiver cup. - Make sure the arrow on the special tool is pointed toward the rear subframe when removing the bushing. Assemble the Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Bushing Remover/Installers to the rear subframe and press out the bushing. Installation NOTE: There are 2 RDU bushings in the subframe, this procedure shows how to install one bushing. The procedure for the remaining RDU bushing is identical. 1. NOTE: Make sure the alignment marks on the special tool are aligned with the anti-rotation tabs on the RDU bushing. Install the RDU bushing into the Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Bushing (65 mm) Remover/Installer. 2. NOTE: Make sure the alignment marks are correctly aligned on both RDU Bushing Remover/Installer and the anti-rotation tabs are correctly seated in the Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Bushing (65 mm) Remover/Installer. Install the Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Bushing (65 mm) Remover/Installer onto the RDU bushing. 3. Inspect the rear subframe to find the revision part number. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 916 4. NOTE: - Make sure the arrow on the special tool is visible on the bottom and facing away from the subframe. The arrow must remain straight so that the bushings are correctly indexed into the subframe. - When installing the RDU bushing, 204-617/2 will fall away as the RDU bushing is installed into the subframe. The Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Bushing Remover/Installer does not control the depth of the bushing, continue to tighten the nut until the RDU bushing is fully seated into the subframe. - For subframe revision 8T43-5K067-BA, the RDU bushing must be inset 2 mm (0.08 in). Install the RDU bushing into the subframe. 5. Install the RDU. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Monitoring System: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation > Page 922 Tire Monitoring System: Service and Repair TPMS Sensor Training - Intellegent Access (IA) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Intelligent Access (IA) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires~ tire rotation will not affect the system. NOTE: Refer to Description and Operation, Intelligent Access (IA) with Push Button Start in Anti-Theft to review the procedures for achieving the various ignition states (ignition in accessory, ignition on, ignition start, ignition off) on vehicles with this feature. 1. With the ignition OFF, press and release the brake pedal. 2. Using the start/stop switch, position the ignition from OFF to RUN 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Position the ignition to OFF position. 5. Using the start/stop switch, position the ignition from OFF to RUN 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation > Page 923 display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMSsensor identifiers trained to the and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C278O, cause the to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the On-Demand Self Test. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation > Page 924 Tire Monitoring System: Service and Repair TPMS Sensor Training - Integrated Keyhead Transmittier (IKT) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires~ tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation > Page 925 - The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C278O, cause SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the SJB On-Demand Self Test. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Module HVAC: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Control Module HVAC: Customer Interest A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Module HVAC: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response Control Module HVAC: Customer Interest Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response TSB 10-23-2 12/03/10 OUTSIDE AIR TEMP READING INACCURATE AND/OR SLOW TO UPDATE IN WARM AMBIENT TEMPERATURES FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 9/1/2010, may experience the outside air temperature (OAT) reading inaccurate and/or slow to update in actual ambient temperatures 70 °F (21 °C) or above. Vehicles equipped with dual automatic temperature control (DATC) System may also experience a lack of A/C cooling at startup. This typically occurs when the OAT sensor is (10-15 °F or more) lower than the actual ambient temperature during starting up. This causes reduced air[low because the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) blower speed is not adequate for the climate conditions. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 69.05 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASH THE OAT DISPLAY WILL NEED A FEW MINUTES, INITIALLY, OF CONSTANT DRIVING TO OBTAIN THE CURRENT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102302A 2011 Edge, MKX: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The HVAC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19980 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Instruments, A/C Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response TSB 10-23-2 12/03/10 OUTSIDE AIR TEMP READING INACCURATE AND/OR SLOW TO UPDATE IN WARM AMBIENT TEMPERATURES FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 9/1/2010, may experience the outside air temperature (OAT) reading inaccurate and/or slow to update in actual ambient temperatures 70 °F (21 °C) or above. Vehicles equipped with dual automatic temperature control (DATC) System may also experience a lack of A/C cooling at startup. This typically occurs when the OAT sensor is (10-15 °F or more) lower than the actual ambient temperature during starting up. This causes reduced air[low because the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) blower speed is not adequate for the climate conditions. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 69.05 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASH THE OAT DISPLAY WILL NEED A FEW MINUTES, INITIALLY, OF CONSTANT DRIVING TO OBTAIN THE CURRENT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102302A 2011 Edge, MKX: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The HVAC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19980 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Module HVAC: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Control Module HVAC: Customer Interest A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Module HVAC: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response Control Module HVAC: Customer Interest Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response TSB 10-23-2 12/03/10 OUTSIDE AIR TEMP READING INACCURATE AND/OR SLOW TO UPDATE IN WARM AMBIENT TEMPERATURES FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 9/1/2010, may experience the outside air temperature (OAT) reading inaccurate and/or slow to update in actual ambient temperatures 70 °F (21 °C) or above. Vehicles equipped with dual automatic temperature control (DATC) System may also experience a lack of A/C cooling at startup. This typically occurs when the OAT sensor is (10-15 °F or more) lower than the actual ambient temperature during starting up. This causes reduced air[low because the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) blower speed is not adequate for the climate conditions. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 69.05 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASH THE OAT DISPLAY WILL NEED A FEW MINUTES, INITIALLY, OF CONSTANT DRIVING TO OBTAIN THE CURRENT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102302A 2011 Edge, MKX: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The HVAC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19980 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response TSB 10-23-2 12/03/10 OUTSIDE AIR TEMP READING INACCURATE AND/OR SLOW TO UPDATE IN WARM AMBIENT TEMPERATURES FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 9/1/2010, may experience the outside air temperature (OAT) reading inaccurate and/or slow to update in actual ambient temperatures 70 °F (21 °C) or above. Vehicles equipped with dual automatic temperature control (DATC) System may also experience a lack of A/C cooling at startup. This typically occurs when the OAT sensor is (10-15 °F or more) lower than the actual ambient temperature during starting up. This causes reduced air[low because the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) blower speed is not adequate for the climate conditions. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 69.05 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASH THE OAT DISPLAY WILL NEED A FEW MINUTES, INITIALLY, OF CONSTANT DRIVING TO OBTAIN THE CURRENT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102302A 2011 Edge, MKX: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The HVAC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19980 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Control Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns Accessory Control Display: Customer Interest Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns TSB 11-3-15 03/15/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS WITH MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH FORD: 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2011 MKX This article supersedes TSB 11-3-4 to update the Issue statement. ISSUE Some 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch may experience various concerns in the following areas: Clock intermittently displays incorrect time, voice recognition, voice recognition when using SYNC services, phone pairing, USB device detection, Travel Link download time. ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Failure to follow the Accessory Protocol Inter[ace Module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues and system functionality concerns. 1. Ensure that the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) release is at 71.04 or higher, then close the IDS software. 2. Edge and MKX vehicles - skip to Step 3. Explorer vehicles - Media Hub removal is not recommended for this procedure due to limited USB cable length. A second USB cable connection can be easily accessed behind the passenger side center console panel for this procedure. a. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-12. Gently pull the front of the passenger console panel away from the console, allowing access to the USB cable connection. b. Disconnect the vehicle USB cable and connect the SYNC re-flash kit cable and Adapter Rotunda RTTP CCMSYNC-Kit or equivalent Male-A USB-to-female mini USB cable to the vehicle male USB cable. 3. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00 APIM Programming - Standard selection. Update the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) to the latest BH suffix level. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110315A 2011 Edge, MKX And 1.3 Hrs. Explorer: Reprogram The APIM (Full Reprogramming Procedure) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 OASIS CODES: 200000 ^ 201000 ^ 201100 ^ 203000 ^ 204000 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Control Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns > Page 979 ^ 204100 ^ 205000 ^ 207000 ^ 207500 ^ 208000 ^ 208100 ^ 208200 ^ 208300 ^ 208999 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Control Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns Accessory Control Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns TSB 11-3-15 03/15/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS WITH MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH FORD: 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2011 MKX This article supersedes TSB 11-3-4 to update the Issue statement. ISSUE Some 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch may experience various concerns in the following areas: Clock intermittently displays incorrect time, voice recognition, voice recognition when using SYNC services, phone pairing, USB device detection, Travel Link download time. ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Failure to follow the Accessory Protocol Inter[ace Module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues and system functionality concerns. 1. Ensure that the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) release is at 71.04 or higher, then close the IDS software. 2. Edge and MKX vehicles - skip to Step 3. Explorer vehicles - Media Hub removal is not recommended for this procedure due to limited USB cable length. A second USB cable connection can be easily accessed behind the passenger side center console panel for this procedure. a. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-12. Gently pull the front of the passenger console panel away from the console, allowing access to the USB cable connection. b. Disconnect the vehicle USB cable and connect the SYNC re-flash kit cable and Adapter Rotunda RTTP CCMSYNC-Kit or equivalent Male-A USB-to-female mini USB cable to the vehicle male USB cable. 3. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00 APIM Programming - Standard selection. Update the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) to the latest BH suffix level. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110315A 2011 Edge, MKX And 1.3 Hrs. Explorer: Reprogram The APIM (Full Reprogramming Procedure) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 OASIS CODES: 200000 ^ 201000 ^ 201100 ^ 203000 ^ 204000 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Control Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns > Page 985 ^ 204100 ^ 205000 ^ 207000 ^ 207500 ^ 208000 ^ 208100 ^ 208200 ^ 208300 ^ 208999 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Control Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Accessory Control Display: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Collision Avoidance Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1005 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1006 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1007 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1008 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Communications Control Module: Customer Interest Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 1014 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1020 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1021 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1022 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1023 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 1028 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 1034 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1040 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1041 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1042 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1043 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Central Control Module: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns Central Control Module: Customer Interest Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns TSB 11-3-15 03/15/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS WITH MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH FORD: 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2011 MKX This article supersedes TSB 11-3-4 to update the Issue statement. ISSUE Some 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch may experience various concerns in the following areas: Clock intermittently displays incorrect time, voice recognition, voice recognition when using SYNC services, phone pairing, USB device detection, Travel Link download time. ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Failure to follow the Accessory Protocol Inter[ace Module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues and system functionality concerns. 1. Ensure that the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) release is at 71.04 or higher, then close the IDS software. 2. Edge and MKX vehicles - skip to Step 3. Explorer vehicles - Media Hub removal is not recommended for this procedure due to limited USB cable length. A second USB cable connection can be easily accessed behind the passenger side center console panel for this procedure. a. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-12. Gently pull the front of the passenger console panel away from the console, allowing access to the USB cable connection. b. Disconnect the vehicle USB cable and connect the SYNC re-flash kit cable and Adapter Rotunda RTTP CCMSYNC-Kit or equivalent Male-A USB-to-female mini USB cable to the vehicle male USB cable. 3. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00 APIM Programming - Standard selection. Update the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) to the latest BH suffix level. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110315A 2011 Edge, MKX And 1.3 Hrs. Explorer: Reprogram The APIM (Full Reprogramming Procedure) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 OASIS CODES: 200000 ^ 201000 ^ 201100 ^ 203000 ^ 204000 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Central Control Module: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns > Page 1052 ^ 204100 ^ 205000 ^ 207000 ^ 207500 ^ 208000 ^ 208100 ^ 208200 ^ 208300 ^ 208999 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns Central Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns TSB 11-3-15 03/15/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS WITH MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH FORD: 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2011 MKX This article supersedes TSB 11-3-4 to update the Issue statement. ISSUE Some 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch may experience various concerns in the following areas: Clock intermittently displays incorrect time, voice recognition, voice recognition when using SYNC services, phone pairing, USB device detection, Travel Link download time. ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Failure to follow the Accessory Protocol Inter[ace Module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues and system functionality concerns. 1. Ensure that the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) release is at 71.04 or higher, then close the IDS software. 2. Edge and MKX vehicles - skip to Step 3. Explorer vehicles - Media Hub removal is not recommended for this procedure due to limited USB cable length. A second USB cable connection can be easily accessed behind the passenger side center console panel for this procedure. a. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-12. Gently pull the front of the passenger console panel away from the console, allowing access to the USB cable connection. b. Disconnect the vehicle USB cable and connect the SYNC re-flash kit cable and Adapter Rotunda RTTP CCMSYNC-Kit or equivalent Male-A USB-to-female mini USB cable to the vehicle male USB cable. 3. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00 APIM Programming - Standard selection. Update the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) to the latest BH suffix level. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110315A 2011 Edge, MKX And 1.3 Hrs. Explorer: Reprogram The APIM (Full Reprogramming Procedure) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 OASIS CODES: 200000 ^ 201000 ^ 201100 ^ 203000 ^ 204000 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns > Page 1058 ^ 204100 ^ 205000 ^ 207000 ^ 207500 ^ 208000 ^ 208100 ^ 208200 ^ 208300 ^ 208999 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Blind Spot Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Blind Spot Module: Customer Interest Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Blind Spot Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Blind Spot Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Blind Spot Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Blind Spot Module: > 11-3-36 > Mar > 11 > A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - System Comes On At Vehicle Start Up TSB 11-3-36 03/31/11 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMING ON AT VEHICLE STARTUP FORD: 2011 Edge ISSUE Some 2011 Edge vehicles equipped with the front control inter[ace module (FCIM) base 10.7 cm (4.2 in.) display screen (SE, lower trim level SEL and not equipped with MyFord Touch), may exhibit the climate control system coming on at vehicle startup, even though the customer shut off the climate control system prior to vehicle ignition off. ACTION Reprogram the FCIM with the latest calibration using the IDS release 72.01 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.3 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110336A 2011 Edge: Reprogram 0.3 Hr. The FCIM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18842 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Collision Avoidance Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Collision Avoidance Module: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Collision Avoidance Module: Customer Interest Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Collision Avoidance Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Collision Avoidance Module: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Collision Avoidance Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1104 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1105 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1106 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1107 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Global Positioning System: Customer Interest Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 1113 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1119 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1120 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1121 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1122 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 1127 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 1133 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1139 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1140 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1141 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1142 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: Customer Interest Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1165 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1166 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1167 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1168 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Navigation System: Customer Interest Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 1174 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1180 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1181 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1182 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1183 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 1188 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 1194 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1200 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1201 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1202 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1203 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: > 11-3-2 > Mar > 11 > Audio System - Volume Control Fluctuation Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: Customer Interest Audio System - Volume Control Fluctuation TSB 11-3-2 03/07/11 AUDIO VOLUME CONTROL FLUCTUATION AND SATELLITE STATION PRESET CONCERNS BUILT ON OR BEFORE 1/21/2011 FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 1/21/2011 may exhibit a concern with audio volume control fluctuation when depressing the steering wheel controls and turn signals are activated, and satellite preset station information disappears and/or may report all satellite stations as unsubscribed even though the receiver is subscribed. ACTION Reprogram the Audio Control Module (ACM) to the latest calibration using the IDS release 71.04 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE PLEASE ADVISE THE CUSTOMER THAT THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH AN ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSION SHIFT STRATEGY WHICH ALLOWS THE VEHICLE'S COMPUTER TO LEARN THE TRANSMISSION'S UNIQUE PARAMETERS AND IMPROVE SHIFT QUALITY. WHEN THE ADAPTIVE STRATEGY IS RESET, THE COMPUTER WILL BEGIN A RE-LEARNING PROCESS. THIS RE-LEARNING PROCESS MAY RESULT IN FIRMER THAN NORMAL UPSHIFTS AND DOWNSHIFTS FOR SEVERAL DAYS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110302A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The ACM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18C869 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: > 11-3-2 > Mar > 11 > Audio System - Volume Control Fluctuation Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Volume Control Fluctuation TSB 11-3-2 03/07/11 AUDIO VOLUME CONTROL FLUCTUATION AND SATELLITE STATION PRESET CONCERNS BUILT ON OR BEFORE 1/21/2011 FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 1/21/2011 may exhibit a concern with audio volume control fluctuation when depressing the steering wheel controls and turn signals are activated, and satellite preset station information disappears and/or may report all satellite stations as unsubscribed even though the receiver is subscribed. ACTION Reprogram the Audio Control Module (ACM) to the latest calibration using the IDS release 71.04 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE PLEASE ADVISE THE CUSTOMER THAT THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH AN ADAPTIVE TRANSMISSION SHIFT STRATEGY WHICH ALLOWS THE VEHICLE'S COMPUTER TO LEARN THE TRANSMISSION'S UNIQUE PARAMETERS AND IMPROVE SHIFT QUALITY. WHEN THE ADAPTIVE STRATEGY IS RESET, THE COMPUTER WILL BEGIN A RE-LEARNING PROCESS. THIS RE-LEARNING PROCESS MAY RESULT IN FIRMER THAN NORMAL UPSHIFTS AND DOWNSHIFTS FOR SEVERAL DAYS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110302A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The ACM (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18C869 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Blind Spot Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blind Spot Module: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Blind Spot Module: Customer Interest Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Blind Spot Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blind Spot Module: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Blind Spot Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Central Control Module: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns Central Control Module: Customer Interest Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns TSB 11-3-15 03/15/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS WITH MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH FORD: 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2011 MKX This article supersedes TSB 11-3-4 to update the Issue statement. ISSUE Some 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch may experience various concerns in the following areas: Clock intermittently displays incorrect time, voice recognition, voice recognition when using SYNC services, phone pairing, USB device detection, Travel Link download time. ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Failure to follow the Accessory Protocol Inter[ace Module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues and system functionality concerns. 1. Ensure that the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) release is at 71.04 or higher, then close the IDS software. 2. Edge and MKX vehicles - skip to Step 3. Explorer vehicles - Media Hub removal is not recommended for this procedure due to limited USB cable length. A second USB cable connection can be easily accessed behind the passenger side center console panel for this procedure. a. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-12. Gently pull the front of the passenger console panel away from the console, allowing access to the USB cable connection. b. Disconnect the vehicle USB cable and connect the SYNC re-flash kit cable and Adapter Rotunda RTTP CCMSYNC-Kit or equivalent Male-A USB-to-female mini USB cable to the vehicle male USB cable. 3. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00 APIM Programming - Standard selection. Update the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) to the latest BH suffix level. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110315A 2011 Edge, MKX And 1.3 Hrs. Explorer: Reprogram The APIM (Full Reprogramming Procedure) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 OASIS CODES: 200000 ^ 201000 ^ 201100 ^ 203000 ^ 204000 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Central Control Module: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns > Page 1239 ^ 204100 ^ 205000 ^ 207000 ^ 207500 ^ 208000 ^ 208100 ^ 208200 ^ 208300 ^ 208999 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns Central Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns TSB 11-3-15 03/15/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS WITH MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH FORD: 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2011 MKX This article supersedes TSB 11-3-4 to update the Issue statement. ISSUE Some 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch may experience various concerns in the following areas: Clock intermittently displays incorrect time, voice recognition, voice recognition when using SYNC services, phone pairing, USB device detection, Travel Link download time. ACTION Follow Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Failure to follow the Accessory Protocol Inter[ace Module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues and system functionality concerns. 1. Ensure that the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) release is at 71.04 or higher, then close the IDS software. 2. Edge and MKX vehicles - skip to Step 3. Explorer vehicles - Media Hub removal is not recommended for this procedure due to limited USB cable length. A second USB cable connection can be easily accessed behind the passenger side center console panel for this procedure. a. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-12. Gently pull the front of the passenger console panel away from the console, allowing access to the USB cable connection. b. Disconnect the vehicle USB cable and connect the SYNC re-flash kit cable and Adapter Rotunda RTTP CCMSYNC-Kit or equivalent Male-A USB-to-female mini USB cable to the vehicle male USB cable. 3. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00 APIM Programming - Standard selection. Update the Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) to the latest BH suffix level. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110315A 2011 Edge, MKX And 1.3 Hrs. Explorer: Reprogram The APIM (Full Reprogramming Procedure) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 OASIS CODES: 200000 ^ 201000 ^ 201100 ^ 203000 ^ 204000 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Central Control Module: > 11-3-15 > Mar > 11 > Accessories - Various Functionality Concerns > Page 1245 ^ 204100 ^ 205000 ^ 207000 ^ 207500 ^ 208000 ^ 208100 ^ 208200 ^ 208300 ^ 208999 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Collision Avoidance Module: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Collision Avoidance Module: Customer Interest Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Collision Avoidance Module: > 11-3-19 > Mar > 11 > Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set Collision Avoidance Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Collision Avoidance - False Blockage/DTC U3000 Set TSB 11-3-19 03/15/11 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS) AND CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) - FALSE BLOCKAGE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(DTC) - U3000 FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Taurus 2011 Edge, Explorer LINCOLN: 2010-2011 MKZ, MKT 2011 MKX MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan This article supersedes TSB 10-24-12 to update the vehicle model lines. ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Taurus, Fusion, Milan, MKZ, MKT, 2011 Edge, MKX and Explorer vehicles equipped with blind spot information system (BLIS) and cross traffic alert (CTA) may exhibit diagnostic trouble code (DTC) U3000 stored in the left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) side obstacle detection (SOD) module and/or continuous blockage messages displayed (BLIS not available) and/or (CTA not available) in the message center. Blockage messages that clear after a key cycle, reappear on clear days with no heavy rain or snow may be attributed to system software. ACTION Reprogram the left and right SOD modules to the latest calibration using IDS release 70.02 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110319A 2010-2011 Fusion, Milan, 0.3 Hr. MKZ, Taurus, And MKT: Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 110319A 2011 Edge, MKX, Explorer: 0.3 Hr. Check For DTCs And Reprogram The Left And Right SOD Modules (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C689 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1267 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1268 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1269 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1270 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Communications Control Module: Customer Interest Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 1276 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1282 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1283 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1284 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1285 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 1290 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues TSB 10-24-9 12/16/10 VARIOUS FUNCTIONALITY CONCERN WITH THE MYFORD TOUCH AND MYLINCOLN TOUCH SYSTEM FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may experience various concerns with MyFord Touch and MyLincoln Touch Systems that include the following areas: Traffic, Direction and Information (IDI) calling wrong phone number, Travel Link subscription, voice recognition, phone pairing, address book downloads, intermittent touch screen inoperable conditions, SD card fault, screen reboots, performing system maintenance, navigation set in kilometers/voice communicates in miles, and reverse camera scrolling display. To correct these conditions the APIM will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE It's recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. Failure to follow the accessory protocol interface module (APIM) - Standard programming steps may result in programming issues. 1. To perform the reprogram procedure it will be necessary to follow the online version of the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. a. Do not use the Custom selection. b. This is a complete software update. Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) release 70.01 or higher is required. c. During programming the operation should not be interrupted. (1) If the programming operation is interrupted and/or an error is encountered, ensure IDS is at the latest level. (2) Close the Internet Explorer (IE) browser and relaunch Professional Technician Society (PTS) from a new IE browser and retry the APIM-Standard programming selection 2. Verify all vehicle equipped functions are operational such as Navigation, TDI and Travel Link after reprogramming module. 3. Before attempting to perform the reprogram procedure, there are several items required in conjunction with the scan tool. a. Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00 /or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. b. USB flash drive with minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). USB drives should be basic drives with no file organizing software or smart functions. c. Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. d. The scan tool web browser settings may need to be configured if IE has recently been updated or the scan tool has not previously been configured for SYNC programming. Refer to Software Programming V 1.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under Service Tip tab. e. Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended when programming to prevent interference concerns during the reprogram process. f. A battery power supply/charger Rotunda 162-00043 or equivalent is required during the first portion of programming and will be removed when the scan tool prompts to start the engine. (1) When connecting the charger the positive lead is connected to battery positive and the negative battery charger lead should be connected to Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-24-9 > Dec > 10 > Communications System - 'Touch' Systems Issues > Page 1296 the chassis ground post located next to the battery. (2) Connecting the charger in this manner is required to allow the scan tool and vehicle modules recognition of battery voltage during programming. (3) If battery voltage is not sufficient during programming, the process will fail and ask you to retry. A battery icon is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool during programming. If the battery icon is red or neutral, it is indicating the vehicle battery is in a low voltage condition. g. Applications are automatically selected by the scan tool and are indicated by grayed out selections. No additional selections are required. h. Scan tools that have never been used to program SYNC may encounter a Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation. If the request is encountered install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. (1) The SBOOT driver is required for Scan tool to APIM communication through the USB cable. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT102409 Use SLTS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14D212 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 10B20 Date: 110107 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on January 7, 2011. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1302 Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on January 7, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by January 21, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. NOTE: If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement after reprogramming, all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Once approval is granted, the APIM must be ordered by completing the 1878 form on PTS. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Note: APIM (14D212) replacement requires prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through January 31, 2012. There is no mileage limit for this program. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1303 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information 10B20110107-005 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW Dealers are to reprogram the SYNC system to the latest level. This software update will provide enhanced overall system functionality and incorporate some improved media features and driver services. REQUIRED TOOLS 1. SYNC Re-Flash Kit # CCMSYNC-KIT or equivalent (required for performing a Full Flash) - USB cable and USB adapter called out in the WSM, Section 415-00/or equivalent Type A Male to mini type B 5 pin female USB cable. NOTE: One equivalent Molex(R) cable adapter # 689990425-101123D was shipped to each dealer in support of TSB 10-24-09 in December of 2010. 2. USB flash drive ^ Minimum storage size of 1 gigabyte (GB). ^ The USB flashdrive should be a basic drive that does not contain any file organizing software or smart functions. 3. Battery power supply/charger ^ The battery icon displayed in the lower right hand corner of the scan tool will be green when battery voltage is adequate. ^ The negative battery charger lead must be connected to chassis ground to allow the vehicle's Load Shed strategy to accurately monitor the battery state of charge during programming. Do not connect the negative lead to the negative battery terminal. 4. IDS and internet ^ IDS software release 70.03A and higher or 71.01 and higher is required. ^ Hard wired internet connection is strongly recommended. ^ Minimum of 3 GB of free disk space on the scan tool. 5. Firsttime IDS Preparation ^ A Hardware Wizard pop up requesting a WMA SBOOT driver installation may occur while programming. If the request is encountered, install the driver and then click the scan tool retry button to continue programming. This driver installation will occur only once on the scan tool's first "MyFord Touch Full Flash reprogramming" attempt. ^ If reprogramming concerns occur, refer to Software Programming Vi.1 on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site under the Service Tip tab to verify proper configuration of the IDS. If reprogramming concerns can not be resolved, contact the Tech Service Hotline using the standard HAR process. 6. Additional Information A My Touch programming video and FAQs are available on the PTS web site. To locate this information from the OASIS tab, select the "Service Tips" tab. The video and FAQs are listed under "Job Aids". SYNC APPLICATION SELECTION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1304 The Full Flash reprogramming process will erase and install all SYNC applications. The proper applications will be automatically selected (see Figure 1), but must be verified against the vehicle content information prior to installation. NOTE: If it is questionable whether a vehicle should be equipped with Navigation, inspect the window sticker for the Navigation option. To view the window sticker online: ^ Access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and enter the VIN in OASIS ^ Select the HVBoM button at the top of the page ^ Select the Find Vehicle button ^ Select the Window Sticker button If the correct application part numbers were not selected automatically, manually select them based on the following tables: FORD EDGE WITHOUT NAVIGATION FORD EDGE WITH NAVIGATION Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10B20 > Jan > 11 > Campaign - SYNC(R) System Reprogramming > Page 1305 LINCOLN MKX WITHOUT NAVIGATION LINCOLN MKX WITH NAVIGATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: It is recommended to fully read the Service Procedure prior to performing the reprogramming. 1. View the SYNC CCPU SAN Version to determine the reprogramming requirements by selecting the following on the vehicle's touch screen: ^ Menu ^ Help ^ System Information If the SYNC CCPU SIW Version is currently lower than 4.22.10308, a Full Flash will be required. A Full Flash procedure may take up to 45 minutes to perform. If the SYNC CCPU SAN Version is currently at 4.22.10308 or higher, a Service Pack installation will be required. The installation of the Service Pack will take approximately 20 minutes to perform. 2. To perform either the Full Flash or Service Pack reprogramming procedure, follow the online version of the Workshop Manual, Section 415-00, APIM Programming - Standard selection. ^61GA Full Flash will follow all steps. ^ A Service Pack installation will follow all steps except the use of the SYNC Re-Flash Kit. NOTE: During programming, the operation should not be interrupted. If the process is interrupted, attempt the procedure a second time (second attempts are typically shorter than first attempts). NOTE: To avoid additional programming concerns, do not swap modules from one vehicle to another. If the APIM (14D212) requires replacement all dealers must obtain prior approval from the Technical Service Hotline. To request approval, access the Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website and run OASIS with an applicable symptom code. Select "Prior Approval" and then select "SYNC Module" under the "Other Prior Approval Programs" heading to complete web form. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > NHTSA11V128000 > Feb > 11 > Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection Body Control Module: Recalls Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 21, 2011 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 11V128000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Electrical System: Software POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 8,022 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Ford F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge, and Lincoln MKX trucks manufactured from October 25, 2010, through November 20, 2010. These vehicles were inspected using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) that had a custom software routine to read the suspect Body Control Module (BCM) serial number. Based on the serial number the BCM was either not affected or replaced. The custom software routine was not reading the correct set of characters, and was not able to identify a BCM that required replacement affected BCMs may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which could result in a vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the body control module and if necessary replace it free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about March 7, 2011. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship CENTER AT 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10S14S3 Date: 110218 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1320 Attachment I - Administrative Information [NEW!] OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS will be activated on February 18, 2011. [NEW!] FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes FSA VIN list will be available through the website on February 18, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. [NEW!] STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. [NEW!] SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Previously inspected vehicles have been reactivated in OASIS for Safety Recall 10S14. Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1321 ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES If a customer's vehicle requires replacement of the BCM and it is necessary to order parts Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel insurance and tax which will be at the owner's expense. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee the shortest delivery time. Prior approval for more than two rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. [NEW!] CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Rental Expenses: Must be claimed on the same repair line as labor operation 10S14D. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. - Misc. Expense Code: RENTAL - Misc. Expense Amount: Actual dollar amount (up to 2 days) Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1322 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION To manage part availability dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line. Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for a BCM please be prepared to provide dealer P&A; code VIN RO # and vehicle mileage. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1323 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1324 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1325 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall - Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1326 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > NHTSA10V659000 > Dec > 10 > Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard Body Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 29, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V659000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Structure: Body POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 14,737 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles. During a six-day production period, the supplier of the body control module manufactured modules that may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which can result in an unattended vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the body control module if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before January 10, 2011. owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1335 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1336 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1337 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1338 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > NHTSA11V128000 > Feb > 11 > Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 11V128000: Body Control Module Inspection VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 21, 2011 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 11V128000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Electrical System: Software POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 8,022 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Ford F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge, and Lincoln MKX trucks manufactured from October 25, 2010, through November 20, 2010. These vehicles were inspected using Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) that had a custom software routine to read the suspect Body Control Module (BCM) serial number. Based on the serial number the BCM was either not affected or replaced. The custom software routine was not reading the correct set of characters, and was not able to identify a BCM that required replacement affected BCMs may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which could result in a vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the body control module and if necessary replace it free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about March 7, 2011. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship CENTER AT 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10S14S3 Date: 110218 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1348 Attachment I - Administrative Information [NEW!] OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS will be activated on February 18, 2011. [NEW!] FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes FSA VIN list will be available through the website on February 18, 2011. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2011. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. [NEW!] STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. [NEW!] SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Previously inspected vehicles have been reactivated in OASIS for Safety Recall 10S14. Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1349 ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES If a customer's vehicle requires replacement of the BCM and it is necessary to order parts Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for fuel insurance and tax which will be at the owner's expense. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for part replacement. The parts order must be an emergency order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to guarantee the shortest delivery time. Prior approval for more than two rental days is required from the Special Service Support Center. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. [NEW!] CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ Rental Expenses: Must be claimed on the same repair line as labor operation 10S14D. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts. - Misc. Expense Code: RENTAL - Misc. Expense Amount: Actual dollar amount (up to 2 days) Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1350 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION To manage part availability dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line. Dealers will receive a DOES II message when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels. When calling to place an order for a BCM please be prepared to provide dealer P&A; code VIN RO # and vehicle mileage. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Service Support Center Parts Order Line or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1351 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1352 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1353 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10S14S3 > Feb > 11 > Recall Body Control Module Replacement > Page 1354 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > NHTSA10V659000 > Dec > 10 > Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard Body Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V659000: Body Control Module Fire Hazard VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Ford/F-150 2011 Ford/F-250 2011 Ford/F-350 2011 Ford/F-450 2011 Ford/F-550 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 29, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V659000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Structure: Body POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 14,737 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450, F-550, Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles. During a six-day production period, the supplier of the body control module manufactured modules that may have the potential for an internal short. CONSEQUENCE: If an electrical short develops, an overheating condition may occur which can result in an unattended vehicle fire. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the body control module if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before January 10, 2011. owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10S14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1363 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1364 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1365 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1366 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door: > 11-3-7 > Mar > 11 > Body - Popping Sound From Rear Door When Opening Rear Door: Customer Interest Body - Popping Sound From Rear Door When Opening TSB 11-3-7 03/15/11 REAR DOOR POPPING SOUND WHEN OPENING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/25/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2008-2011 MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-14-1 to add a production fix date and update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 10/25/2010 may experience a popping noise when opening one of the rear doors, typically the right hand side, especially if the door has been closed for a minimum of 10 minutes. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This sound may be caused by the rubber bumper located on the lower rear corner of the rear door inner panel. (Figure 1) Suction between this bumper and body side panel may cause a pop with door opening if there is a narrow seal gap between the door and body. 1. On the affected rear door, remove the rubber bumper located near the lower rear corner of the rear door inner panel. (Figure 1) 2. Insert a rubber plug into the exposed hole. To aid in the installation of the rubber plug, place a small Phillips or Torx screw driver in the center hole opening of the rubber plug. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110307A 2008-2011 Edge, MKX: 0.2 Hr. Remove The Rubber Bumper And Install Service Plug On One Or Both Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door: > 11-3-7 > Mar > 11 > Body - Popping Sound From Rear Door When Opening > Page 1377 Doors (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5424630 41 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door: > 11-3-7 > Mar > 11 > Body - Popping Sound From Rear Door When Opening Rear Door: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Popping Sound From Rear Door When Opening TSB 11-3-7 03/15/11 REAR DOOR POPPING SOUND WHEN OPENING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/25/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2008-2011 MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-14-1 to add a production fix date and update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 10/25/2010 may experience a popping noise when opening one of the rear doors, typically the right hand side, especially if the door has been closed for a minimum of 10 minutes. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This sound may be caused by the rubber bumper located on the lower rear corner of the rear door inner panel. (Figure 1) Suction between this bumper and body side panel may cause a pop with door opening if there is a narrow seal gap between the door and body. 1. On the affected rear door, remove the rubber bumper located near the lower rear corner of the rear door inner panel. (Figure 1) 2. Insert a rubber plug into the exposed hole. To aid in the installation of the rubber plug, place a small Phillips or Torx screw driver in the center hole opening of the rubber plug. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110307A 2008-2011 Edge, MKX: 0.2 Hr. Remove The Rubber Bumper And Install Service Plug On One Or Both Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door: > 11-3-7 > Mar > 11 > Body - Popping Sound From Rear Door When Opening > Page 1383 Doors (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5424630 41 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door: > Page 1384 Rear Door: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 11-3-7 Date: 110315 Body - Popping Sound From Rear Door When Opening TSB 11-3-7 03/15/11 REAR DOOR POPPING SOUND WHEN OPENING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/25/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2008-2011 MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-14-1 to add a production fix date and update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 10/25/2010 may experience a popping noise when opening one of the rear doors, typically the right hand side, especially if the door has been closed for a minimum of 10 minutes. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This sound may be caused by the rubber bumper located on the lower rear corner of the rear door inner panel. (Figure 1) Suction between this bumper and body side panel may cause a pop with door opening if there is a narrow seal gap between the door and body. 1. On the affected rear door, remove the rubber bumper located near the lower rear corner of the rear door inner panel. (Figure 1) 2. Insert a rubber plug into the exposed hole. To aid in the installation of the rubber plug, place a small Phillips or Torx screw driver in the center hole opening of the rubber plug. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110307A 2008-2011 Edge, MKX: 0.2 Hr. Remove The Rubber Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door: > Page 1385 Bumper And Install Service Plug On One Or Both Doors (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5424630 41 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 11-3-7 Date: 110315 Body - Popping Sound From Rear Door When Opening TSB 11-3-7 03/15/11 REAR DOOR POPPING SOUND WHEN OPENING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/25/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2008-2011 MKX This article supersedes TSB 10-14-1 to add a production fix date and update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 10/25/2010 may experience a popping noise when opening one of the rear doors, typically the right hand side, especially if the door has been closed for a minimum of 10 minutes. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This sound may be caused by the rubber bumper located on the lower rear corner of the rear door inner panel. (Figure 1) Suction between this bumper and body side panel may cause a pop with door opening if there is a narrow seal gap between the door and body. 1. On the affected rear door, remove the rubber bumper located near the lower rear corner of the rear door inner panel. (Figure 1) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door: > Page 1386 2. Insert a rubber plug into the exposed hole. To aid in the installation of the rubber plug, place a small Phillips or Torx screw driver in the center hole opening of the rubber plug. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110307A 2008-2011 Edge, MKX: 0.2 Hr. Remove The Rubber Bumper And Install Service Plug On One Or Both Doors (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5424630 41 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1396 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1397 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1398 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1399 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > NHTSA10V516000 > Oct > 10 > Recall 10V516000: Liftgate Latch Non-Compliance Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V516000: Liftgate Latch Non-Compliance VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 25, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V516000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Hatchback/Liftgate: Lock POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 71 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles manufactured from July 1, 2010, through October 8, 2010. These vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic module settings that disable the locking function of the liftgate. Accordingly, the vehicles fail to conform to the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." CONSEQUENCE: The liftgate lock may be disabled and the driver may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. REMEDY: Ford will notify owners and dealers will have the affected control modules updated free of charge. The safety recall began on November 1, 2010. Owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10C14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1409 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1410 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1411 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1412 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > NHTSA10V516000 > Oct > 10 > Recall 10V516000: Liftgate Latch Non-Compliance Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V516000: Liftgate Latch Non-Compliance VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 25, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V516000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Hatchback/Liftgate: Lock POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 71 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles manufactured from July 1, 2010, through October 8, 2010. These vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic module settings that disable the locking function of the liftgate. Accordingly, the vehicles fail to conform to the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." CONSEQUENCE: The liftgate lock may be disabled and the driver may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. REMEDY: Ford will notify owners and dealers will have the affected control modules updated free of charge. The safety recall began on November 1, 2010. Owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10C14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1425 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1426 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1427 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1428 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1434 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1435 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1436 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1437 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1446 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1447 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1448 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1449 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1455 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1456 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1457 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1458 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1464 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1465 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1466 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1467 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Description and Operation Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Description and Operation Subframe and Mounting Systems Front Subframe The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms. - provide the mounting surface for the steering gear. - provide the mounting surface for the sway bar. Rear Subframe The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms. - provide a mounting point for the rear differential, if equipped. - provide a mounting surface for the sway bar. Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the suspension parts and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening concerns and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by incorrectly tightened bolts and body misalignment. For body misalignment and checking, refer to Specifications / Dimensions. Before any welding is carried out on the vehicle, refer to Welding / Service Precautions. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right Front Subframe: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right > Page 1481 IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-24-8 > Dec > 10 > Steering/Suspension Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right > Page 1487 IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 1488 Front Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-24-8 Date: 101216 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 1489 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-24-8 Date: 101216 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Drifts/Pulls To The Right TSB 10-24-8 12/16/10 DRIFT/PULL TO THE RIGHT FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull right concern even though the tire pressures and wheel alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially raise vehicle. 2. Spin all wheels and inspect for brake drag. a. If brake drag is present, do not continue with this article. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-05, for normal diagnostics. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 1490 b. If no brake drag is present, proceed to Step 3. 3. Swap front tires and wheels from side to side (LF to RF) and retest for a drift/pull to the right. a. If the concern is resolved, return vehicle to customer. b. If the concern is still present, proceed to Step 4. 4. Record wheel alignment settings to establish a baseline. 5. Remove the RH splash shield. Refer to WSM, Section 501-02. 6. Remove three (3) pushpin fasteners, seven (7) screws and the front splash shield. 7. Using a wax pencil, mark the position of the front subframe to the underbody at each of the mounting nut locations. 8. Remove the subframe mounting nuts, one at a time, and replace with new nuts leaving 2 threads exposed to allow for subframe movement. a. Negative cross caster and positive cross camber will reduce vehicle drift right. Increasing negative cross caster is preferred over positive cross camber. 9. Increase negative cross caster to achieve a minimum of -0.5 degrees, not to exceed -1.2 degrees cross caster. Increase positive cross camber to achieve a minimum of +0.6 degrees, not to exceed +1.2 degrees cross camber. Right hand camber not to exceed -1.2 degrees. a. To increase negative cross caster, rotate the subframe clockwise, as viewed from the bottom of the car, taking note of the left front subframe bushing and the right rear subframe bushing. For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement outboard of both the left front and right rear subframe bushings, cross caster will increase by approximately 0.25 degrees. b. To increase positive cross camber, slide the subframe to the right (passenger side). For every 1 mm (1/32") of lateral movement, cross camber will increase approximately 0.15 degrees. 10. Torque subframe mounting nuts to 133 N.m (98 lb-ft). 11. Reset front toe to specifications. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102408A 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 0.5 Hr. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, And Road Test Concern Is Resolved (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102408B 2011 Edge, MKX: Inspect 2.6 Hrs. For Brake Drag, Rotate Front Tires From Side To Side, Road Test Concern Not Resolved, Adjust Front Sub Frame, And Perform Front End Alignment (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5C145 W6 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 1491 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1492 Front Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe - Front Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1493 Subframe - Front NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. With a wax pencil, mark the relationship of the front subframe to the underbody at the mounting locations. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1494 2. Remove the RH splash shield. 3. Remove the 3 pushpin fasteners, the 7 screws and the front splash shield. 4. Remove the 3 RH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Remove the 3 LH subframe-to-lower bumper nuts and separate the lower bumper from the subframe. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1495 6. Remove the 3 power steering tube bracket bolts from the RH side of the subframe and position the power steering tube aside. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. NOTE: - Use the holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. - RH side shown, LH side similar. Remove the 2 stabilizer bar link-to-control arm nuts (1 each side) and separate the stabilizer bar links from the lower control arms. Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 8. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Remove the lower control arm-to-knuckle pinch bolts and separate the lower control arms from the knuckles. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1496 9. Loosen the Y-pipe clamp and disconnect the 2 exhaust hangers. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 10. Remove the 4 nuts and the Y-pipe assembly. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 11. NOTE: - The steering gear is not removed with the front subframe and must be positioned aside. - Position the steering gear aside using mechanic's wire. Remove the 4 bolts and position the steering rack aside using a suitable length of mechanic's wire. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten the steering gear bolts in the sequence shown. To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 12. Remove the 4 bolts and position the stabilizer bar aside using a suitable length of mechanic's wire. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1497 - Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 13. Remove the nuts and the roll restrictor heat shield. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in). 14. Remove the 3 bolts from the roll restrictor bracket. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 15. Position the lift table under the subframe. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1498 16. NOTE: - Align the front subframe index marks to the body index marks made during removal. - During installation, the subframe brackets are loosely installed with the support bracket bolts. Tighten the rear subframe nuts prior to tightening the support bracket bolts. - LH shown, RH similar. Remove the underbody cross brace. Remove the RH and LH cross brace bolts and the cross brace. - Discard the bolts. - To Install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 17. Remove the 2 nuts, 2 bolts and the subframe support brackets. - Discard the nuts and bolts. - To install, tighten the nuts to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft). - To install, tighten the bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 18. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1499 19. Remove the 2 middle subframe nuts and remove the subframe. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 133 Nm (98 lb-ft). 20. Transfer the components as necessary. 21. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe - Rear Subframe - Rear Special Tool(s) Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 1504 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Rear Subframe Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 1505 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Rear Subframe NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. 1. Remove the rear wheels. 2. If equipped, remove the bolts from the driveshaft-to-rear drive unit flange. - To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 1506 3. With a wax pencil, mark the relationship of the rear subframe to the underbody at the mounting locations. 4. Remove the muffler and tailpipe assembly. 5. Disconnect the LH and RH wheel speed sensor connectors. 6. NOTE: All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) similar. Remove the connector from the front of the subframe and position aside. 7. NOTICE: Do not allow the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose may occur. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) from the rear hub spindle-to-brake caliper. To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 1507 8. Remove the 2 bolts (1 each side) from the brake hose bracket. 9. Position the brake calipers aside using mechanic's wire. It is not necessary to disconnect the hydraulic brake lines. 10. Remove the 2 nuts (1 each side) from the parking brake cable bracket and upper stabilizer shaft. - Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 11. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) from the parking brake cable-to-backing plate. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 1508 12. Remove the rear shock-to-trailing link lower nuts and flag bolts. - Discard the nuts and flag bolts. - To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 13. NOTICE: - The rear subframe must be secured to the lifting table. The rear subframe may become unstable and fall from the lifting table. - Position a jackstand under the front of the vehicle to keep the vehicle from becoming unstable on the hoist. Position the lifting table under the rear subframe. 14. Remove the 4 front (2 each side) bushing brace-to-body bolts. - Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 15. Remove the 2 front (1 each side) mounting bolts from the rear subframe. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 1509 - Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 200 Nm (148 lb-ft). 16. NOTE: The bolts are 2 different sizes, note the location of the bolts to make sure of correct installation. Remove the 10 bolts (5 each side) from the trailing links-to-vehicle body. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 17. NOTE: The rear springs are under pressure. The lifting table must be lowered slowly to relieve the spring pressure. Remove the 2 rear mounting bolts. Discard the bolts. - To install, tighten to 200 Nm (148 lb-ft). 18. Remove the rear subframe. 19. Transfer the components as necessary. 20. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 1510 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe Bushings - Rear Differential, Rear Subframe Bushings - Differential, Rear Special Tool(s) Subframe Bushings - Rear Differential, Rear Removal Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 1511 NOTE: There are 2 Rear Drive Unit (RDU) bushings in the rear subframe, this procedure shows how to remove one bushing. The procedure for the remaining RDU bushing is identical. 1. Remove the RDU. 2. NOTE: - Make sure the Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Bushing Remover/Installer 204-617/2 is positioned with the larger opening toward the bushing to act as the receiver cup. - Make sure the arrow on the special tool is pointed toward the rear subframe when removing the bushing. Assemble the Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Bushing Remover/Installers to the rear subframe and press out the bushing. Installation NOTE: There are 2 RDU bushings in the subframe, this procedure shows how to install one bushing. The procedure for the remaining RDU bushing is identical. 1. NOTE: Make sure the alignment marks on the special tool are aligned with the anti-rotation tabs on the RDU bushing. Install the RDU bushing into the Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Bushing (65 mm) Remover/Installer. 2. NOTE: Make sure the alignment marks are correctly aligned on both RDU Bushing Remover/Installer and the anti-rotation tabs are correctly seated in the Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Bushing (65 mm) Remover/Installer. Install the Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Bushing (65 mm) Remover/Installer onto the RDU bushing. 3. Inspect the rear subframe to find the revision part number. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and Repair > Subframe - Rear > Page 1512 4. NOTE: - Make sure the arrow on the special tool is visible on the bottom and facing away from the subframe. The arrow must remain straight so that the bushings are correctly indexed into the subframe. - When installing the RDU bushing, 204-617/2 will fall away as the RDU bushing is installed into the subframe. The Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Bushing Remover/Installer does not control the depth of the bushing, continue to tighten the nut until the RDU bushing is fully seated into the subframe. - For subframe revision 8T43-5K067-BA, the RDU bushing must be inset 2 mm (0.08 in). Install the RDU bushing into the subframe. 5. Install the RDU. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1522 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1523 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1524 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1525 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: Customer Interest Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1552 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1553 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1554 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1555 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1561 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1562 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1563 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1564 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: Customer Interest Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: Customer Interest Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1602 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1603 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1604 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1605 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA10V516000 > Oct > 10 > Recall 10V516000: Liftgate Latch Non-Compliance Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V516000: Liftgate Latch Non-Compliance VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 25, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V516000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Hatchback/Liftgate: Lock POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 71 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles manufactured from July 1, 2010, through October 8, 2010. These vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic module settings that disable the locking function of the liftgate. Accordingly, the vehicles fail to conform to the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." CONSEQUENCE: The liftgate lock may be disabled and the driver may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. REMEDY: Ford will notify owners and dealers will have the affected control modules updated free of charge. The safety recall began on November 1, 2010. Owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10C14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1624 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1625 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1626 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1627 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Recalls for Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: > NHTSA10V516000 > Oct > 10 > Recall 10V516000: Liftgate Latch Non-Compliance Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V516000: Liftgate Latch Non-Compliance VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Edge 2011 Lincoln/MKX 2011 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 25, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V516000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Hatchback/Liftgate: Lock POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 71 SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2011 Edge and Lincoln MKX vehicles manufactured from July 1, 2010, through October 8, 2010. These vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic module settings that disable the locking function of the liftgate. Accordingly, the vehicles fail to conform to the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." CONSEQUENCE: The liftgate lock may be disabled and the driver may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. REMEDY: Ford will notify owners and dealers will have the affected control modules updated free of charge. The safety recall began on November 1, 2010. Owners may contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford safety recall No. 10C14. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 10C14 Date: 101026 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on October26, 2010. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1637 FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website on October 26, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by November 16, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS Refunds are not authorized for this program. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1638 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts are not required to complete this repair. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles were shipped with incorrectly configured electronic modules. As a result, the liftgate lock may be disabled and customers may not be able to lock the liftgate using interior lock switches or remote key fob buttons. All other door locks will function to customer expectation. Dealers are to use IDS to reconfigure the vehicle's as-built data in the Body Control Module (BCM) and, if equipped with push button start, the Remote Function Actuator (RFA). For vehicles with less than 75 miles, dealers also need to perform the applicable pre-delivery inspection steps that transitions the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. BCM CONFIGURATION UPDATE 1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off. 2. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session. 3. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick. 4. Select As-Built and then select BCM. Touch the tick. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the BCM. ^ When prompted to select the most appropriate condition, select "NO - I want to update the module configuration for some other reason". ^ When prompted to select the method of entry, select Automatic. NOTE: If the IDS states "Module configuration unsuccessful", touch the tick and repeat steps 3 through 5. The IDS may take more than one attempt to complete the download. Once successful, the IDS will return to the Module Programming screen. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with push button start, proceed to the RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE procedure. ^ If the vehicle is equipped with a keyed ignition switch, proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. RFA CONFIGURATION UPDATE 6. Obtain the two lines of as-built data by accessing the PTS OASIS screen and clicking the As-Built button. 7. From the Module Programming screen, select As-Built and then select RFA. Touch the tick. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to reconfigure the RFA. ^ When asked "Would you like to obtain back-up configuration data for this vehicle?" select YES. 9. Proceed to the TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE procedure. TRANSITION THE VEHICLE FROM TRANSPORT MODE TO CUSTOMER MODE ^ If the vehicle has more than 75 miles, the vehicle will be in Customer Mode and no further action is required. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1639 ^ If the vehicle has less than 75 miles, proceed with the following steps to transition the vehicle from Transport Mode to Customer Mode. 10. Place the ignition in the run position. 11. Tap the brake pedal 5 times and press the hazard switch 4 times (on, off, on, off) within 10 seconds. 12. Cycle the ignition off and on. Verify the transport mode warning message is not displayed on the instrument cluster. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 10C14 > Oct > 10 > Recall - Liftgate Lock Non-Compliance > Page 1640 Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > NHTSA10V516000 > Oct > 10 > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: Customer Interest Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 11-2-4 > Feb > 11 > Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Various Functional Issues TSB 11-2-4 02/07/11 VARIOUS FUNCTIONAL ISSUES WITH MEMORY SEATS/MIRRORS/COLUMNS FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge/MKX vehicles built on or before 1/20/2011 may experience various functional issues with memory seats/mirrors/columns, such as: If the memory positions are unprogrammed, Easy Entry/Exit may not work. With Easy Entry/Exit enabled, the seat may move backwards when putting the key in ignition or may move forward when removing the key from ignition. If the mirror or column is moved via the switch after a memory recall, they may not remain in that position and may instead move to the memory position with the next key in or key out. A memory position recall may occur when putting the key in or out of the ignition. If the front tilt and rear lift switches are operated together in opposite directions, the seat stops moving. Memory seats may not move forward when memory recall is commanded via switch or fob. To correct these concerns the driver seat module will need to be reprogrammed. ACTION Reprogram the driver seat module to the latest software calibration level using the IDS release 71 .02A or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2011.1 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASHING THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE THE SOFT STOPS MUST BE RESET. REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 501-10, DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110204A 2011 Edge And MKX: 0.4 Hr. Reprogram The DSM Includes Time To Reset Driver Seat Soft Stops (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operation) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14C708 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response Outside Temperature Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response TSB 10-23-2 12/03/10 OUTSIDE AIR TEMP READING INACCURATE AND/OR SLOW TO UPDATE IN WARM AMBIENT TEMPERATURES FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 9/1/2010, may experience the outside air temperature (OAT) reading inaccurate and/or slow to update in actual ambient temperatures 70 °F (21 °C) or above. Vehicles equipped with dual automatic temperature control (DATC) System may also experience a lack of A/C cooling at startup. This typically occurs when the OAT sensor is (10-15 °F or more) lower than the actual ambient temperature during starting up. This causes reduced air[low because the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) blower speed is not adequate for the climate conditions. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 69.05 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASH THE OAT DISPLAY WILL NEED A FEW MINUTES, INITIALLY, OF CONSTANT DRIVING TO OBTAIN THE CURRENT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102302A 2011 Edge, MKX: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The HVAC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19980 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and Operation Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation Sound Deadeners and Insulators WARNING: Always refer to Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) when handling chemicals and wear protective equipment as directed. Examples may include but are not limited to respirators and chemically resistant gloves. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: - Mastic is made of a combustible material and should be removed prior to carrying out welding procedures to the area. Heat zones from welding near the mastic can cause the mastic material to burn. - After repairs, corrosion protection must be restored to the area AFTER the mastic material is applied. Corrosion protection products may be wax based and loss of adhesion may occur. NOTE: - The following illustration serves as a reference to indicate mastic patch (butyl pad) locations. Additional insulators and sound deadeners are used beyond those indicated in the illustration. - To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and insulators should be replaced with the correct service replacement component. - Floor pan interior view. 1. Whenever replacement of an existing mastic insulator is carried out, the surface must be thoroughly cleaned to make sure correct adhesion will occur. The surface should be 10°C (50°F) or greater before applying the mastic. The use of a heat gun to warm the metal surface will aid in adhesion. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component Information > Locations Instrument Cluster / Carrier: Locations Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Base Optional Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Outside Temperature Display: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response Outside Temperature Display: Customer Interest Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response TSB 10-23-2 12/03/10 OUTSIDE AIR TEMP READING INACCURATE AND/OR SLOW TO UPDATE IN WARM AMBIENT TEMPERATURES FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 9/1/2010, may experience the outside air temperature (OAT) reading inaccurate and/or slow to update in actual ambient temperatures 70 °F (21 °C) or above. Vehicles equipped with dual automatic temperature control (DATC) System may also experience a lack of A/C cooling at startup. This typically occurs when the OAT sensor is (10-15 °F or more) lower than the actual ambient temperature during starting up. This causes reduced air[low because the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) blower speed is not adequate for the climate conditions. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 69.05 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASH THE OAT DISPLAY WILL NEED A FEW MINUTES, INITIALLY, OF CONSTANT DRIVING TO OBTAIN THE CURRENT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102302A 2011 Edge, MKX: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The HVAC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19980 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Outside Temperature Display: > 10-23-2 > Dec > 10 > Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response Outside Temperature Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments, A/C - Outside Temp Inaccurate/Slow Response TSB 10-23-2 12/03/10 OUTSIDE AIR TEMP READING INACCURATE AND/OR SLOW TO UPDATE IN WARM AMBIENT TEMPERATURES FORD: 2011 Edge LINCOLN: 2011 MKX ISSUE Some 2011 Edge and MKX vehicles built on or before 9/1/2010, may experience the outside air temperature (OAT) reading inaccurate and/or slow to update in actual ambient temperatures 70 °F (21 °C) or above. Vehicles equipped with dual automatic temperature control (DATC) System may also experience a lack of A/C cooling at startup. This typically occurs when the OAT sensor is (10-15 °F or more) lower than the actual ambient temperature during starting up. This causes reduced air[low because the heating ventilation air conditioning (HVAC) blower speed is not adequate for the climate conditions. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Reprogram the HVAC module to the latest calibration using IDS release 69.05 or higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. NOTE AFTER REFLASH THE OAT DISPLAY WILL NEED A FEW MINUTES, INITIALLY, OF CONSTANT DRIVING TO OBTAIN THE CURRENT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102302A 2011 Edge, MKX: 0.3 Hr. Reprogram The HVAC Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19980 04 Disclaimer Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Monitoring System: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the vehicle doors open. Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation > Page 1698 Tire Monitoring System: Service and Repair TPMS Sensor Training - Intellegent Access (IA) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Intelligent Access (IA) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires~ tire rotation will not affect the system. NOTE: Refer to Description and Operation, Intelligent Access (IA) with Push Button Start in Anti-Theft to review the procedures for achieving the various ignition states (ignition in accessory, ignition on, ignition start, ignition off) on vehicles with this feature. 1. With the ignition OFF, press and release the brake pedal. 2. Using the start/stop switch, position the ignition from OFF to RUN 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Position the ignition to OFF position. 5. Using the start/stop switch, position the ignition from OFF to RUN 3 times, ending in the RUN position. - The horn will sound once and the indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation > Page 1699 display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in place at the valve stem. Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMSsensor identifiers trained to the and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C278O, cause the to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out the On-Demand Self Test. Ford Edge Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.7L (2011)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation > Page 1700 Tire Monitoring System: Service and Repair TPMS Sensor Training - Integrated Keyhead Transmittier (IKT) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires~ tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position.